Remove HTML from CVS since it is now regenerated by MAKE
svn: r880
This commit is contained in:
		@@ -1,163 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>Authors</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.59"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Writing Extentions for gramps"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Common tasks"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="commontasks.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="License"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="license.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Extentions for gramps</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="commontasks.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="80%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="license.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="AUTHORS"
 | 
			
		||||
>Authors</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>gramps</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> was written by Don Allingham
 | 
			
		||||
    (<TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="EMAIL"
 | 
			
		||||
><<A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="mailto:dallingham@users.sourceforge.net"
 | 
			
		||||
>dallingham@users.sourceforge.net</A
 | 
			
		||||
>></TT
 | 
			
		||||
>). To find more
 | 
			
		||||
    information about <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>gramps</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>, please visit
 | 
			
		||||
    the <A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="http://gramps.sourceforge.net"
 | 
			
		||||
TARGET="_top"
 | 
			
		||||
>gramps
 | 
			
		||||
    web page</A
 | 
			
		||||
>.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    This manual was written by Don Allingham
 | 
			
		||||
    (<TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="EMAIL"
 | 
			
		||||
><<A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="mailto:donaldallingham@home.com"
 | 
			
		||||
>donaldallingham@home.com</A
 | 
			
		||||
>></TT
 | 
			
		||||
>).
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="commontasks.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="license.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Common tasks</TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>License</TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,379 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>Common tasks</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.59"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Writing Extentions for gramps"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Writing Export Filters"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingexportfilters.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Authors"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="authors.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Extentions for gramps</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingexportfilters.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="80%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="authors.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="COMMONTASKS"
 | 
			
		||||
>Common tasks</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    While this manual does not document the
 | 
			
		||||
    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>gramps</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> database interface, this section
 | 
			
		||||
    shows a few common tasks.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GETTINGNAMES"
 | 
			
		||||
>Printing names of people</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      This example shows how to display the name of people in the
 | 
			
		||||
      database. It assumes that the database is called
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>db</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>. To get a list of people, it calls the
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>getPersonMap</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> method, which returns a map of
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>gramps</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> ID to
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>Person</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> objects. Calling the
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>valus</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> method of the returned map returns a
 | 
			
		||||
      list of people. For each person, the primary name is extracted,
 | 
			
		||||
      and then the <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>Name</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> object's
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>getName</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> method is called to build a
 | 
			
		||||
      presentable name from the individual name components.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="DISPLAYNAMES"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
><PRE
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
 | 
			
		||||
>
for person in db.getPersonMap().values():
 | 
			
		||||
    name = person.getPrimaryName()
 | 
			
		||||
    print name.getName()
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
	</PRE
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 6. Displaying names</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="LISTINGEVENTS"
 | 
			
		||||
>Displaying the events of person</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      This example shows how to display the public events associated
 | 
			
		||||
      with a person. It assumes that the person is called
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>person</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="EVENTEXAMPLE"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
><PRE
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
 | 
			
		||||
>
for event in person.getEventList():
 | 
			
		||||
    if event.getPrivacy() == 0:
 | 
			
		||||
        print "Event:",event.getName()
 | 
			
		||||
	print "Date:",event.getDate()
 | 
			
		||||
	print "Place:",event.getPlaceName()
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
	</PRE
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 7. Displaying Event Information</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PRINTFAMILY"
 | 
			
		||||
>Print the members of each family</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      This example shows how to display the parents and children of
 | 
			
		||||
      each family in the database. It assumes that the database is called
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>db</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="FAMILYEXAMPLE"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
><PRE
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
 | 
			
		||||
>
for family in db.getFamilyMap().values:
 | 
			
		||||
    print "-------------------"
 | 
			
		||||
    print "Family ID:",family.getId()
 | 
			
		||||
    father = family.getFather()
 | 
			
		||||
    if father != None:
 | 
			
		||||
        print "Father:",father.getPrimaryName().getName()
 | 
			
		||||
    mother = family.getMother()
 | 
			
		||||
    if mother != None:
 | 
			
		||||
        print "Mother:",mother.getPrimaryName().getName()
 | 
			
		||||
    for child in family.getChildList():
 | 
			
		||||
        print "Child:",child.getPrimaryName().getName()
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
	</PRE
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 8. Displaying Family Information</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PERSONSFAMILY"
 | 
			
		||||
>Display the marriages/relationships of a person</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      This example shows how to display the families and relationships
 | 
			
		||||
      in which the person is considered a spouse or parent. It assumes
 | 
			
		||||
      that the person is called <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>person</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Relationships between people can be complex. Because someone is
 | 
			
		||||
      male, does not necessarily mean that the person will be
 | 
			
		||||
      considered the "Father" of a relationship. In relationships of
 | 
			
		||||
      type "Partners", the "father" and "mother" of the relationship
 | 
			
		||||
      should be of the same gender. So to determine the spouse of a
 | 
			
		||||
      person, it is usually best to compare the person against what is
 | 
			
		||||
      returned by <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>getFather</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> and
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>getMother</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> to find the one that is not
 | 
			
		||||
      equal.  It should also be noted that the
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>getFather</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> and
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>getMother</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> methods will return None if noone
 | 
			
		||||
      has been associated with that role in the family.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="RELEXAMPLE"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
><PRE
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
 | 
			
		||||
>
for family in person.getFamilyList():
 | 
			
		||||
    print "-------------------"
 | 
			
		||||
    print "Family ID:",family.getId()
 | 
			
		||||
    print "Relationship Type:",family.getRelationship()
 | 
			
		||||
    father = family.getFather()
 | 
			
		||||
    if father != None and father != person:
 | 
			
		||||
        print "Spouse:",father.getPrimaryName().getName()
 | 
			
		||||
    mother = family.getMother()
 | 
			
		||||
    if mother != None and mother != person:
 | 
			
		||||
        print "Spouse:",mother.getPrimaryName().getName()
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
	</PRE
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 9. Displaying Relationship Information</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingexportfilters.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="authors.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Export Filters</TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Authors</TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,319 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Extentions for gramps</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.59"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Writing Filters"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingfilters.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="ARTICLE"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="ARTICLE"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="TITLEPAGE"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="TITLE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="AEN2"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Extentions for gramps</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="COPYRIGHT"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="ln7.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Copyright</A
 | 
			
		||||
> © 2001 by Donald N. Allingham</P
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="75%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="CENTER"
 | 
			
		||||
COLOR="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
SIZE="1"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="TOC"
 | 
			
		||||
><DL
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Table of Contents</B
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html#INTRO"
 | 
			
		||||
>Introduction</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingfilters.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Filters</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingreports.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Reports</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingtools.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Tools</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingimportfilters.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Import Filters</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingexportfilters.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Export Filters</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="commontasks.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Common tasks</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="authors.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Authors</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="license.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>License</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
></DL
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="INTRO"
 | 
			
		||||
>Introduction</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>gramps</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> was intended from the start to
 | 
			
		||||
    allow the user to extend it through a plugin system. Five types of
 | 
			
		||||
    plugins are supported - filters, reports, tools, import filters,
 | 
			
		||||
    and export filters. In a way, an export filter can be viewed as a
 | 
			
		||||
    special type of report, and an import filter can be viewed as a
 | 
			
		||||
    special type of tool.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    All plugins are written in the <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>python</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
    language.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="INTRO_FILTER"
 | 
			
		||||
>Filters</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      A filter is a plugin that be used to temporarily display or hide
 | 
			
		||||
      individuals in the <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>People View</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
>. The
 | 
			
		||||
      filter is the simplest form of plugin, which only needs to
 | 
			
		||||
      determine if a person meets or fails to meet its criteria. It
 | 
			
		||||
      operates on a single person at a time.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Filters should never alter a database.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="INTRO_REPORT"
 | 
			
		||||
>Reports</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      A report is a plugin that generates output. The output may be in
 | 
			
		||||
      either a interactive, graphical form, or as an output
 | 
			
		||||
      file. Report plugins are passed a reference to the internal
 | 
			
		||||
      database and a reference to the active person, which allows the
 | 
			
		||||
      plugn to operate on a single person, the entire database, or
 | 
			
		||||
      anything in between.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Plugins that conform to the reportplugin interface appear in the
 | 
			
		||||
        <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>Reports</B
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
      menu and in the <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Report Selection</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> dialog
 | 
			
		||||
      box.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      A report should never alter the database.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="INTRO_TOOL"
 | 
			
		||||
>Tools</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      A tool is a plugin that alters the database. It may perform
 | 
			
		||||
      something as small changing the case of some text to something
 | 
			
		||||
      as complex as merging redundant individuals. Tools plugins are
 | 
			
		||||
      passed a reference to the internal database, the active person,
 | 
			
		||||
      and a callback function. The callback function is used to notify
 | 
			
		||||
      the main program if it needs to update the display with any
 | 
			
		||||
      modified information.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Plugins that conform to the tool plugin interface appear in the
 | 
			
		||||
        <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>Tools</B
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
      menu and in the <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Tool Selection</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> dialog
 | 
			
		||||
      box.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      A tool is allowed (and usually expected) to alter the database.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="INTRO_IMPORT"
 | 
			
		||||
>Import Filters</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      An import filter is a plugin that adds information from another
 | 
			
		||||
      source to the database. It is similar to a tool, but is called
 | 
			
		||||
      differently to allow gramps to distinguish it from a tool.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Plugins that conform to the import filter calling syntax appear
 | 
			
		||||
      in the
 | 
			
		||||
        <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>File</B
 | 
			
		||||
>-><B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUISUBMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>Import</B
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
      menu.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      An import filter is allowed to modify the database.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="INTRO_EXPORT"
 | 
			
		||||
>Export Filters</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      An export filter is a plugin that translates the gramps database
 | 
			
		||||
      into the format expected by another program. Since it generates
 | 
			
		||||
      an output file, it is similar to a report generator. However,
 | 
			
		||||
      its calling syntax is different, so that gramps knows how to
 | 
			
		||||
      distiguish it from a report generator.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Plugins that conform to the export filter calling syntax appear
 | 
			
		||||
      in the
 | 
			
		||||
        <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>File</B
 | 
			
		||||
>-><B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUISUBMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>Export</B
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
      menu.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      An export filter should not alter the database.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingfilters.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Filters</TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,187 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>License</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.59"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Writing Extentions for gramps"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Authors"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="authors.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Extentions for gramps</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="authors.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="80%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="LICENSE"
 | 
			
		||||
>License</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
 | 
			
		||||
    modify it under the terms of the <A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="gnome-help:gpl"
 | 
			
		||||
TARGET="_top"
 | 
			
		||||
> <I
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="CITETITLE"
 | 
			
		||||
>GNU General Public
 | 
			
		||||
    License</I
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
> as published by the Free Software
 | 
			
		||||
    Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option)
 | 
			
		||||
    any later version.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
 | 
			
		||||
    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
 | 
			
		||||
    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
 | 
			
		||||
    <I
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="CITETITLE"
 | 
			
		||||
>GNU General Public License</I
 | 
			
		||||
> for more
 | 
			
		||||
    details.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    A copy of the <I
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="CITETITLE"
 | 
			
		||||
>GNU General Public License</I
 | 
			
		||||
> is
 | 
			
		||||
    included as an appendix to the <I
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="CITETITLE"
 | 
			
		||||
>GNOME Users
 | 
			
		||||
    Guide</I
 | 
			
		||||
>.  You may also obtain a copy of the
 | 
			
		||||
    <I
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="CITETITLE"
 | 
			
		||||
>GNU General Public License</I
 | 
			
		||||
> from the Free
 | 
			
		||||
    Software Foundation by visiting <A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="http://www.fsf.org"
 | 
			
		||||
TARGET="_top"
 | 
			
		||||
>their Web site</A
 | 
			
		||||
> or by writing to
 | 
			
		||||
    <P
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="ADDRESS"
 | 
			
		||||
>    Free Software Foundation, Inc.  <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="STREET"
 | 
			
		||||
>59 Temple Place</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> -<br>
 | 
			
		||||
    Suite 330 <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="CITY"
 | 
			
		||||
>Boston</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
>, <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="STATE"
 | 
			
		||||
>MA</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
><br>
 | 
			
		||||
    <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="POSTCODE"
 | 
			
		||||
>02111-1307</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="COUNTRY"
 | 
			
		||||
>USA</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
><br>
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="authors.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Authors</TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,128 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.59"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Writing Extentions for gramps"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="UP"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Writing Extentions for gramps"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html#AEN2"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Writing Filters"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingfilters.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Extentions for gramps</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="LEGALNOTICE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="LEGALNOTICE"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
 | 
			
		||||
    document under the terms of the <A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="gnome-help:fdl"
 | 
			
		||||
TARGET="_top"
 | 
			
		||||
><I
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="CITETITLE"
 | 
			
		||||
>GNU Free Documentation
 | 
			
		||||
    License</I
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
>, Version 1.1 or any later version
 | 
			
		||||
    published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant
 | 
			
		||||
    Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts.  A copy
 | 
			
		||||
    of the license can be found <A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="gnome-help:fdl"
 | 
			
		||||
TARGET="_top"
 | 
			
		||||
>here</A
 | 
			
		||||
>.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products
 | 
			
		||||
    and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear
 | 
			
		||||
    in any GNOME documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to
 | 
			
		||||
    the members of the GNOME Documentation Project, the names have
 | 
			
		||||
    been printed in caps or initial caps.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html#AEN2"
 | 
			
		||||
>Up</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,200 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Export Filters</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.59"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Writing Extentions for gramps"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Writing Import Filters"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingimportfilters.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Common tasks"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="commontasks.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Extentions for gramps</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingimportfilters.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="80%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="commontasks.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="WRITINGEXPORTFILTERS"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Export Filters</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    Export filters are similar to report generators. They are not
 | 
			
		||||
    allowed to modify the database. An export filter accepts three
 | 
			
		||||
    arguments — a database, the filename of the file that is to
 | 
			
		||||
    be written, and a callback function.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    The callback function is indentical from the callback function
 | 
			
		||||
    used for import filters. The export filter's callback function is
 | 
			
		||||
    used to indicate progress and update the status bar during the
 | 
			
		||||
    export process. The function takes a value between 0.0 and 1.0,
 | 
			
		||||
    where 0.0 represents the start of the export and 1.0 represents
 | 
			
		||||
    the completion of the export.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    As with the other plugin types, an export filter must be
 | 
			
		||||
    registered with <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>gramps</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>. This is
 | 
			
		||||
    accomplished by calling the
 | 
			
		||||
    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>Plugins.register_export</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> task. The
 | 
			
		||||
    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>Plugins.register_export</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> accepts two arguments
 | 
			
		||||
    — the function the performs the import and a string
 | 
			
		||||
    providing a brief description. This description is used as the
 | 
			
		||||
    menu entry under the
 | 
			
		||||
    <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>File</B
 | 
			
		||||
>-><B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUISUBMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>Export</B
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
    menu.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="EXPORTEXAMPLE"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
><PRE
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
 | 
			
		||||
>
import Plugins
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
def gedcom_export(database,filename,callback):
 | 
			
		||||
    ... actual code ...
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
Plugins.register_export(gedcom_export,"GEDCOM export")
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
      </PRE
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 5. Sample Export Implementation</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingimportfilters.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="commontasks.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Import Filters</TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Common tasks</TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,264 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Filters</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.59"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Writing Extentions for gramps"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Writing Extentions for gramps"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Writing Reports"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingreports.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Extentions for gramps</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="80%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingreports.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="WRITINGFILTERS"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Filters</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    Users can create their own filters and add them to
 | 
			
		||||
    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>gramps</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>.  By adding the filter to the
 | 
			
		||||
    user's private filter directory (<TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
 | 
			
		||||
>~/.gramps/filters</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>), the filter will
 | 
			
		||||
    be automatically recognized the next time that the program is
 | 
			
		||||
    started.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="CREATEFILTER"
 | 
			
		||||
>Creating a filter</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Each filter is a class derived from the
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>Filter.Filter</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> class.  The
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>__init__</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> task may be overridden, but if so,
 | 
			
		||||
      should call the <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>__init__</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> function on the
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>Filter.Filter</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> class.  The parent class
 | 
			
		||||
      provides the variable <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>self.text</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>, which
 | 
			
		||||
      contains the text string passed as the qualifier.  This string
 | 
			
		||||
      provides additional information provided by the user. For
 | 
			
		||||
      example, if the filter is used to match names, the qualifier
 | 
			
		||||
      would be used to provide the name that is being compared
 | 
			
		||||
      against.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      All filter classes must define a <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>match</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
      function. The function takes one argument (other than
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>self</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>), which is an object of type
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>Person</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> to compare against. The function
 | 
			
		||||
      should return a 1 if the person matches the filter, or a zero if
 | 
			
		||||
      the person does not.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Each filter must be registered, so that
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>gramps</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> knows about it. This is
 | 
			
		||||
      accomplished by calling the
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>Filter.register_filter</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> function. This
 | 
			
		||||
      function takes three arguments - the filter class, a
 | 
			
		||||
      description, and flag that indicates if the qualifier string is
 | 
			
		||||
      needed. The description string appears in the pull down
 | 
			
		||||
      interface within <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>gramps</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>, and helps
 | 
			
		||||
      the user choose the appropriate filter. The qualifier flag tells
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>gramps</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> whether or not the filter
 | 
			
		||||
      needs a qualifier string. If this flag is 0,
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>gramps</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> will disable the entry of a
 | 
			
		||||
      qualifier string.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="FILTERSRC"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
><PRE
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
 | 
			
		||||
>
import Filter
 | 
			
		||||
import string
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
# class definition
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
class SubString(Filter.Filter):
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    def match(self,person):
 | 
			
		||||
        name = person.getPrimaryName().getName()
 | 
			
		||||
        return string.find(name,self.text) >= 0
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
Filter.register_filter(SubString,
 | 
			
		||||
                       description="Names that contain a substring",
 | 
			
		||||
	               qualifier=1)
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        </PRE
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 1. Sample filter implementation</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingreports.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Extentions for gramps</TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Reports</TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,205 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Import Filters</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.59"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Writing Extentions for gramps"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Writing Tools"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingtools.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Writing Export Filters"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingexportfilters.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Extentions for gramps</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingtools.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="80%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingexportfilters.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="WRITINGIMPORTFILTERS"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Import Filters</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    Import filters are similar to tools, since they are allowed to
 | 
			
		||||
    modify the databases. An import filter is a task that accepts
 | 
			
		||||
    three arguments — a database, the filename of the file that
 | 
			
		||||
    is to be imported, and a callback function.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    The database may or may not have data already in it. The import
 | 
			
		||||
    filter cannot assume that data neither already exists nor that the
 | 
			
		||||
    database is empty.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    The callback function is different from the callback function used
 | 
			
		||||
    for tools. The import filter's callback function is used to
 | 
			
		||||
    indicate progress and update the status bar during the import
 | 
			
		||||
    process. The function takes a value between 0.0 and 1.0, where 0.0
 | 
			
		||||
    represents the start of the import and 1.0 represents the
 | 
			
		||||
    completion of the import.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    As with the other plugin types, an import filter must be
 | 
			
		||||
    registered with <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>gramps</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>. This is
 | 
			
		||||
    accomplished by calling the
 | 
			
		||||
    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>Plugins.register_import</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> task. The
 | 
			
		||||
    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>Plugins.register_import</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> accepts two arguments
 | 
			
		||||
    — the function the performs the import and a string
 | 
			
		||||
    providing a brief description. This description is used as the
 | 
			
		||||
    menu entry under the
 | 
			
		||||
    <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>File</B
 | 
			
		||||
>-><B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUISUBMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>Import</B
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
    menu.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="IMPORTEXAMPLE"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
><PRE
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
 | 
			
		||||
>
import Plugins
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
def gedcom_import(database,filename,callback):
 | 
			
		||||
    ... actual code ...
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
Plugins.register_import(gedcom_import,"GEDCOM import")
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
      </PRE
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 4. Sample Import Implementation</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingtools.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingexportfilters.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Tools</TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Export Filters</TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,347 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Reports</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.59"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Writing Extentions for gramps"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Writing Filters"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingfilters.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Writing Tools"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingtools.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Extentions for gramps</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingfilters.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="80%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingtools.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="WRITINGREPORTS"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Reports</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    Users can create their own report generators and add them to
 | 
			
		||||
    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>gramps</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>.  By adding the report generator
 | 
			
		||||
    to the user's private plugin directory (<TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
 | 
			
		||||
>~/.gramps/plugins</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>), the report
 | 
			
		||||
    generator will be automatically recognized the next time that the
 | 
			
		||||
    program is started.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="CREATEREPORT"
 | 
			
		||||
>Creating a report generator</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Fewer restrictions are made on report generators than on
 | 
			
		||||
      filters.  The report generator is passed the current
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>gramps</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> database and the active
 | 
			
		||||
      person.  The generator needs to take special care to make sure
 | 
			
		||||
      that it does not alter the database in anyway.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      A report generator is a function that takes two arguments
 | 
			
		||||
      — a database (of type <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>RelDataBase</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>)
 | 
			
		||||
      and the currently selected person (of type
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>Person</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>). When called, this task should
 | 
			
		||||
      generate the desired report.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      This function's implementation can be as simple as generating
 | 
			
		||||
      output without the user's intervention, or it could display a
 | 
			
		||||
      graphical interface to allow the user to select options and
 | 
			
		||||
      customize a report.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      As with filters, the report generator must be registered before
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>gramps</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> will understand it. The report
 | 
			
		||||
      generator is registered using the
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>Plugins.register_report</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>. This function
 | 
			
		||||
      takes five arguments.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
><UL
 | 
			
		||||
><LI
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	  <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUILABEL"
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>The report generation task</B
 | 
			
		||||
></TT
 | 
			
		||||
> This task
 | 
			
		||||
	  that generates the report.
 | 
			
		||||
	  </P
 | 
			
		||||
></LI
 | 
			
		||||
><LI
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	  <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUILABEL"
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>The report category</B
 | 
			
		||||
></TT
 | 
			
		||||
> The category in
 | 
			
		||||
	  which the report is grouped in the
 | 
			
		||||
	  <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>Reports</B
 | 
			
		||||
> menu and
 | 
			
		||||
	  in the <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Report Selection</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> dialog.
 | 
			
		||||
	  </P
 | 
			
		||||
></LI
 | 
			
		||||
><LI
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	  <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUILABEL"
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>The report name</B
 | 
			
		||||
></TT
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
	  The name of the report.
 | 
			
		||||
	  </P
 | 
			
		||||
></LI
 | 
			
		||||
><LI
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	  <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUILABEL"
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>A text description of the report</B
 | 
			
		||||
></TT
 | 
			
		||||
> The
 | 
			
		||||
	  description appears in the report selection tool to provide
 | 
			
		||||
	  the user with a description of what the tools does.
 | 
			
		||||
	  </P
 | 
			
		||||
></LI
 | 
			
		||||
><LI
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	  <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUILABEL"
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>A graphic logo in XPM format</B
 | 
			
		||||
></TT
 | 
			
		||||
> This may
 | 
			
		||||
	  be either a path to a filename, or a list of strings
 | 
			
		||||
	  containting the XPM data. If a filename is specified, care
 | 
			
		||||
	  must be taken to make sure the file location is relocatable
 | 
			
		||||
	  and can be determined at runtime.
 | 
			
		||||
	  </P
 | 
			
		||||
></LI
 | 
			
		||||
></UL
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      While only the task and report name are required, it is
 | 
			
		||||
      recommended to provide all five parameters.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="REPORTSRC"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
><PRE
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
 | 
			
		||||
>
import Plugins
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
def report(database,person):
 | 
			
		||||
   ... actual code ...
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
Plugins.register_report(
 | 
			
		||||
    task=report,
 | 
			
		||||
    category="Category",
 | 
			
		||||
    name="Report Name",
 | 
			
		||||
    description="A text descripition of the report generator",
 | 
			
		||||
    xpm="%s/myfile.xpm" % os.path.dirname(__file__)
 | 
			
		||||
)
 | 
			
		||||
        </PRE
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 2. Sample report implementation</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="ALITTLEHELP"
 | 
			
		||||
>A little help - Format Interfaces</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>gramps</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> provides some help with
 | 
			
		||||
      writing reports.  Several generic python classes exist that aid
 | 
			
		||||
      in the writing of report generators.  These classes provide an
 | 
			
		||||
      abstract interface for a type of document, such as a drawing,
 | 
			
		||||
      word processor document, or a spreadsheet.  From these core
 | 
			
		||||
      classes, <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>gramps</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> derives interfaces to
 | 
			
		||||
      various document formats.  This means that by coding to the
 | 
			
		||||
      generic word processing class (<TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>TextDoc</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>), a
 | 
			
		||||
      report generator can instant access to multiple file formats
 | 
			
		||||
      (such as HTML, OpenOffice, and AbiWord).
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      This scheme of deriving a output format from a generic base
 | 
			
		||||
      class also makes it easier to add new formats. Creating a new
 | 
			
		||||
      derivied class targeting a different format (such as
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>KWord</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> or
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>LaTeX</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>) makes it easy for existing
 | 
			
		||||
      report generators to use the new formats.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingfilters.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingtools.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Filters</TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Tools</TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,265 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Tools</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.59"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Writing Extentions for gramps"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Writing Reports"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingreports.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Writing Import Filters"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingimportfilters.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Extentions for gramps</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingreports.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="80%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingimportfilters.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="WRITINGTOOLS"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Tools</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    Users can create their own tools and add them to
 | 
			
		||||
    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>gramps</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>.  By adding the tool to the
 | 
			
		||||
    user's private plugin directory (<TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
 | 
			
		||||
>~/.gramps/plugins</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>), the tool will be
 | 
			
		||||
    automatically recognized the next time that
 | 
			
		||||
    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>gramps</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> is started.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    Unlike a report generator, a tool is allowed to modify the
 | 
			
		||||
    database.  The tool is passed the current
 | 
			
		||||
    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>gramps</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> database, the active person,
 | 
			
		||||
    and a callback function.  The callback function should be called
 | 
			
		||||
    with a non-zero argument upon completion of the tool if the
 | 
			
		||||
    database has been altered.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    As with filters and report generators, tools must be registered
 | 
			
		||||
    before <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>gramps</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> will understand it. The
 | 
			
		||||
    tool is registered using the
 | 
			
		||||
    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
>Plugins.register_tool</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>. This function takes
 | 
			
		||||
    four arguments.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
><UL
 | 
			
		||||
><LI
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	<TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUILABEL"
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>The tool task</B
 | 
			
		||||
></TT
 | 
			
		||||
> This task
 | 
			
		||||
	that executes the tool.
 | 
			
		||||
	</P
 | 
			
		||||
></LI
 | 
			
		||||
><LI
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	<TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUILABEL"
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>The tool category</B
 | 
			
		||||
></TT
 | 
			
		||||
> The category in which
 | 
			
		||||
	the tool is grouped in the
 | 
			
		||||
	<B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>Tools</B
 | 
			
		||||
> menu and in
 | 
			
		||||
	the <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Tool Selection</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> dialog.
 | 
			
		||||
	</P
 | 
			
		||||
></LI
 | 
			
		||||
><LI
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	<TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUILABEL"
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>The tool name</B
 | 
			
		||||
></TT
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
	The name of the tool.
 | 
			
		||||
	</P
 | 
			
		||||
></LI
 | 
			
		||||
><LI
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	<TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUILABEL"
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>A text description of the tool</B
 | 
			
		||||
></TT
 | 
			
		||||
> The
 | 
			
		||||
	description appears in the Tool Selection dialog to provide
 | 
			
		||||
	the user with a description of what the tool does.
 | 
			
		||||
	</P
 | 
			
		||||
></LI
 | 
			
		||||
></UL
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    While only the task and report name are required, it is
 | 
			
		||||
    recommended to provide all five parameters.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="TOOLSRC"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
><PRE
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
 | 
			
		||||
>
import Plugins
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
def tool(database,person,callback):
 | 
			
		||||
   ... actual code ...
 | 
			
		||||
   callback(1)
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
Plugins.register_tool(
 | 
			
		||||
    task=tool,
 | 
			
		||||
    category="Category",
 | 
			
		||||
    name="Tool Name",
 | 
			
		||||
    description="A text descripition of the tool"
 | 
			
		||||
)
 | 
			
		||||
      </PRE
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 3. Sample tool implementation</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingreports.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="writingimportfilters.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Reports</TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Writing Import Filters</TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,178 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>Authors</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.64
 | 
			
		||||
"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="GRAMPS User Manual"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Running Tools"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="runtools.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="License"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="license.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS User Manual</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="runtools.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="80%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="license.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="AUTHORS"
 | 
			
		||||
>Authors</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> was written by Don Allingham
 | 
			
		||||
    (<TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="EMAIL"
 | 
			
		||||
><<A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="mailto:dallingham@users.sourceforge.net"
 | 
			
		||||
>dallingham@users.sourceforge.net</A
 | 
			
		||||
>></TT
 | 
			
		||||
>). To find more
 | 
			
		||||
    information about <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>, please visit
 | 
			
		||||
    the <A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="http://gramps.sourceforge.net"
 | 
			
		||||
TARGET="_top"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS
 | 
			
		||||
    Web page</A
 | 
			
		||||
>.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    This manual was written by Don Allingham
 | 
			
		||||
    (<TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="EMAIL"
 | 
			
		||||
><<A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="mailto:dallingham@users.sourceforge.net"
 | 
			
		||||
>dallingham@users.sourceforge.net</A
 | 
			
		||||
>></TT
 | 
			
		||||
>), Larry Allingham
 | 
			
		||||
    (<TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="EMAIL"
 | 
			
		||||
><<A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="mailto:llkla@erinet.com"
 | 
			
		||||
>llkla@erinet.com</A
 | 
			
		||||
>></TT
 | 
			
		||||
>), and Shawn Ann Griffith
 | 
			
		||||
    (<TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="EMAIL"
 | 
			
		||||
><<A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="mailto:shawnann1@home.com"
 | 
			
		||||
>shawnann1@home.com</A
 | 
			
		||||
>></TT
 | 
			
		||||
>).
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="runtools.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="license.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Running Tools</TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>License</TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,249 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>Bookmarking People</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.64
 | 
			
		||||
"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="GRAMPS User Manual"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Media View"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="mediaview.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Using Revision Control"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="revisoncontrol.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS User Manual</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="mediaview.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="80%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="revisoncontrol.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="BOOKMARKS"
 | 
			
		||||
>Bookmarking People</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> supports two mechanisms to
 | 
			
		||||
    quickly find people - the home person and bookmarks.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="HOMEPERSON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home Person</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      The home person is the default person of the database. Upon
 | 
			
		||||
      loading the database, <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> will set
 | 
			
		||||
      the active person to the default person. At any time, clicking
 | 
			
		||||
      the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button will return the active
 | 
			
		||||
      person to the home person.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      The home person can be set by choosing
 | 
			
		||||
        <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>Settings</B
 | 
			
		||||
>-><B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
 | 
			
		||||
>Set Default Person</B
 | 
			
		||||
>.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="BKMARKS"
 | 
			
		||||
>Bookmarks</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Bookmarks work similar to bookmarks in HTML browsers.  They
 | 
			
		||||
      allow you to quickly jump to a person, making that person the
 | 
			
		||||
      active person. This allows you to avoid searching for them
 | 
			
		||||
      every time you want to add/change something in their information.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GOTOBOOKMARK"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="gotobookmark.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 23. Using Bookmarks</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Choosing
 | 
			
		||||
        <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>Bookmarks</B
 | 
			
		||||
>-><B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
 | 
			
		||||
>Add Bookmark</B
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
      adds the current active person to the bookmark list. The person
 | 
			
		||||
      will then appear in the bookmark list, allowing you to quickly
 | 
			
		||||
      select the person.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Choosing
 | 
			
		||||
        <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>Bookmarks</B
 | 
			
		||||
>-><B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
 | 
			
		||||
>Go to Bookmark</B
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
      displays a submenu which allows you to choose a person who was
 | 
			
		||||
      previously bookmarked. Selecting a person from this menu will
 | 
			
		||||
      make that person the active person.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Choosing
 | 
			
		||||
        <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>Bookmarks</B
 | 
			
		||||
>-><B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
 | 
			
		||||
>Edit Bookmarks</B
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
      displays a dialog box that allows you to reorder or delete
 | 
			
		||||
      bookmarks in the list.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="EDITBOOKMARK"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="editbookmarks.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 24. Editing Bookmarks</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="mediaview.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="revisoncontrol.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Media View</TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Using Revision Control</TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,749 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>Editing a person's data</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.64
 | 
			
		||||
"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="GRAMPS User Manual"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="People View"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="personlist.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Family View"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="familyview.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS User Manual</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="personlist.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="80%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="familyview.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="EDITPERSONDATA"
 | 
			
		||||
>Editing a person's data</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    A person's personal information can be edited in the
 | 
			
		||||
    <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Edit Person</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> dialog.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="AEN133"
 | 
			
		||||
>General Information Tab</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="EP_GENERAL-FIG"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="ep_general.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 5. General Information Tab</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      The General Information tab contains the basic information about
 | 
			
		||||
      the person. This includes the person's name, gender, birth
 | 
			
		||||
      information, and death information.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      If images have been associated with the person, the primary
 | 
			
		||||
      image is displayed on the right side of the window.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="AEN142"
 | 
			
		||||
>Alternate Names Tab</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="EP_NAMES-FIG"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="ep_altname.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 6. Alternate Names Tab</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      It is possible for people to use more than one name during their
 | 
			
		||||
      lifetime. These may be legal name changes, or just informal
 | 
			
		||||
      names. An example would be a person changing his or her name due
 | 
			
		||||
      to marriage or adoption. <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
      allows multiple alternate names to be specified for each person.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      The <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Alternate Names</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> tab allows additional
 | 
			
		||||
      names to be added or removed from list. Clicking the
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Add</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button allows a new name to be added
 | 
			
		||||
      to the list. The <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Edit/View</B
 | 
			
		||||
> allows the
 | 
			
		||||
      selected alternate name to be edited. The
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Delete</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button removes the selected name.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="EVENTTAB"
 | 
			
		||||
>Events Tab</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      The <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Events</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> tab allows information about
 | 
			
		||||
      various events in a person's life to be
 | 
			
		||||
      recorded. <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> provides a list of
 | 
			
		||||
      common events, but allows you to name an event anything that you
 | 
			
		||||
      choose.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      An event consists of the name of an event (such as "Baptism" or
 | 
			
		||||
      "Education"), a date or date range on which the event occurred,
 | 
			
		||||
      the place where the event occurred, and a description of the
 | 
			
		||||
      event. A note or a source may also be attached to the event.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="EP_EVENT-FIG"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="ep_event.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 7. Events Tab</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      The <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Event</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> tab displays information about
 | 
			
		||||
      the currently selected event at the top of the window. Below
 | 
			
		||||
      this information is a list of the events that have been
 | 
			
		||||
      previously entered. Clicking on one of the events in the list
 | 
			
		||||
      selects the event, and displays its information at the top of
 | 
			
		||||
      the window.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      An event may be added by clicking the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Add</B
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
      button. This displays a form that allows you to enter the
 | 
			
		||||
      information about the particular event. The
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Edit/View</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button allows to view or to
 | 
			
		||||
      alter the information of the currently displayed event. The
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Delete</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button allows you to delete the
 | 
			
		||||
      currently displayed event.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="ATTRTAB"
 | 
			
		||||
>Attributes Tab</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Attributes are similar to events, but are for information items
 | 
			
		||||
      that do not necessarily have the concept of a place or a
 | 
			
		||||
      date. An example would be a person's Social Security Number or
 | 
			
		||||
      national origin. Attributes consist of an attribute name and its
 | 
			
		||||
      value.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Like events, attributes may also have a note, source, privacy
 | 
			
		||||
      marker, and confidence level associated with them.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="EP_ATTRIBUTES-FIG"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="ep_attributes.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 8. Attributes Tab</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      The <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Attribute</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> tab displays information
 | 
			
		||||
      about the currently selected attribute at the top of the
 | 
			
		||||
      window. Below this information is a list of the attributes that
 | 
			
		||||
      have been previously entered. Clicking on one of the attributes
 | 
			
		||||
      in the list selects the attribute, and displays its information at
 | 
			
		||||
      the top of the window.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      An attribute may be added by clicking the
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Add</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button. This displays a form that
 | 
			
		||||
      allows you to enter the information about the particular
 | 
			
		||||
      attribute. The <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Edit/View</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button allows to
 | 
			
		||||
      view or to alter the information of the currently displayed
 | 
			
		||||
      attribute. The <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Delete</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button allows you to
 | 
			
		||||
      delete the currently displayed attribute.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="ADDRTAB"
 | 
			
		||||
>Addresses Tab</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Addresses are used to record information about where a person
 | 
			
		||||
      has lived. Addresses are different from
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS'</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> concept of a place. An
 | 
			
		||||
      address, as <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> sees, it consists
 | 
			
		||||
      of an equivalent of a mailing address and the date or date range
 | 
			
		||||
      when the person lived at the address.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Like events and attributes, addresses may also have a note,
 | 
			
		||||
      source, privacy marker, and confidence level associated with
 | 
			
		||||
      them.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="EP_ADDRESS-FIG"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="ep_address.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 9. Addresses Tab</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      The <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Address</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> tab displays information
 | 
			
		||||
      about the currently selected address at the top of the
 | 
			
		||||
      window. Below this information is a list of the addresses that
 | 
			
		||||
      have been previously entered. Clicking on one of the addresses
 | 
			
		||||
      in the list selects the address, and displays its information at
 | 
			
		||||
      the top of the window.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      An address may be added by clicking the
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Add</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button. This displays a form that
 | 
			
		||||
      allows you to enter the information about the particular
 | 
			
		||||
      address. The <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Edit/View</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button allows to
 | 
			
		||||
      view or to alter the information of the currently displayed
 | 
			
		||||
      address. The <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Delete</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button allows you to
 | 
			
		||||
      delete the currently displayed address.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="NOTESTAB"
 | 
			
		||||
>Notes Tab</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      In addition to the notes that may be attached to any particular
 | 
			
		||||
      event, attribute, or address, <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
      has a generic note attached to the person.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="EP_NOTES-FIG"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="ep_notes.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 10. Notes Tab</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      The note window is a free-form edit window, allowing you to
 | 
			
		||||
      enter any information that you want.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GALLERYTAB"
 | 
			
		||||
>Gallery Tab</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      The <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Gallery</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> tab allows you to associate
 | 
			
		||||
      files (known in <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> as media
 | 
			
		||||
      objects) with a particular person. These files are typically
 | 
			
		||||
      images or photographs, but may be of any filetype, such as (but
 | 
			
		||||
      not limited to) sound files and word processing documents.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="EP_GALLERY-FIG"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="ep_gallery.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 11. Gallery Tab</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> provides a central repository
 | 
			
		||||
      for all media objects in the Media View. This allows the same
 | 
			
		||||
      media object to appear in multiple galleries.  Adding a media
 | 
			
		||||
      object to a gallery actually adds the object to the Media View,
 | 
			
		||||
      and makes a local reference in the gallery. 
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      While each media object can have a note and attributes attached
 | 
			
		||||
      to it, each gallery can add its own notes and attributes to the
 | 
			
		||||
      reference in its gallery. This allows media objects to have
 | 
			
		||||
      global and local properties. For example, a photo of a family
 | 
			
		||||
      reunion may have many people in it. A global note may describe
 | 
			
		||||
      the picture in general, identifying the place and date.  When
 | 
			
		||||
      this object is added to a gallery, you can attach a note to the
 | 
			
		||||
      reference in the gallery adding some specific information, such
 | 
			
		||||
      as "Aunt Martha is the third person from the right in the
 | 
			
		||||
      second row". Clicking the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Edit
 | 
			
		||||
      Properties</B
 | 
			
		||||
> allows you to edit the local properties.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="LOCALMEDIA"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="localmedia.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 12. Local Media Properties</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      The first object in the gallery is considered to be the primary
 | 
			
		||||
      image. If this object is an image, it will appear on the
 | 
			
		||||
      <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>General Information</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> tab, and will be the
 | 
			
		||||
      primary image used by report generators. An image can be made
 | 
			
		||||
      the default at any time by selecting the thumbnail image and
 | 
			
		||||
      dragging it to the first position in the gallery. In this same
 | 
			
		||||
      manner, the order of the images can be changed using the same
 | 
			
		||||
      drag and drop technique.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Objects may be added to the gallery in several ways. By clicking
 | 
			
		||||
      the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Add Media Object</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button, a dialog box
 | 
			
		||||
      is presented which allows you to choose an object from the file
 | 
			
		||||
      system.  This method adds a new object to the Media View and
 | 
			
		||||
      creates a reference in the gallery.  Objects may also be added
 | 
			
		||||
      by either dragging and dropping from one gallery to another, or
 | 
			
		||||
      by dragging from the Media View to a gallery. In this case, a
 | 
			
		||||
      new media object is not created, but a reference to an existing
 | 
			
		||||
      media object is made in the gallery, sharing the same media
 | 
			
		||||
      object between galleries. Finally, new objects may be added to a
 | 
			
		||||
      gallery and the Media View by dragging and dropping from a file
 | 
			
		||||
      manager (such as <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>Nautilus</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> or
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>Konqueror</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>) or a web browser (such as
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>Galeon</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>,
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>Mozilla</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>, or
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>Konqueror</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>) into a gallery.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Media objects can be removed from a gallery by clicking the
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Delete Media Object</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button. This action
 | 
			
		||||
      only removes the reference to the current gallery. It does not
 | 
			
		||||
      remove the media object from the Media View or from any other
 | 
			
		||||
      galleries that are referencing it.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Right clicking on a selected object brings up a menu.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Menu options</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
><DL
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
>View in default viewer</DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DD
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	    Allows you to view an object image using GNOME's default
 | 
			
		||||
	    viewer for the file type.
 | 
			
		||||
	    </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DD
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
>Edit with the GIMP</DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DD
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	    Launches the <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>gimp</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> program,
 | 
			
		||||
	    allowing you to edit the image. This option only shows up
 | 
			
		||||
	    if the media object is an image.
 | 
			
		||||
	    </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DD
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
>Edit Object Properties</DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DD
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	    Allows you to change the attributes and note attached to the
 | 
			
		||||
	    media object.
 | 
			
		||||
	    </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DD
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
>Convert to local copy</DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DD
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	    This option is only displayed if the media is a reference
 | 
			
		||||
	    to a file that is not controlled by
 | 
			
		||||
	    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>. Selecting the option
 | 
			
		||||
	    causes <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> to make its own
 | 
			
		||||
	    copy of the media object.
 | 
			
		||||
	    </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DD
 | 
			
		||||
></DL
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="INTERNETTAB"
 | 
			
		||||
>Internet Tab</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Frequently, information about a person is available on the
 | 
			
		||||
      internet, frequently on someone else's web site. With multiple
 | 
			
		||||
      people researching the same family, it is desirable to keep track
 | 
			
		||||
      of internet sites that contain information about someone in your
 | 
			
		||||
      database. This allows you to keep track of the web sites you 
 | 
			
		||||
      can periodically check them for any addition information.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="EP_INTERNET-FIG"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="ep_internet.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 13. Internet Tab</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      The <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Internet</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> tab displays information about
 | 
			
		||||
      the currently selected internet address at the top of the window. Below
 | 
			
		||||
      this information is a list of the internet address that have been
 | 
			
		||||
      previously entered. Clicking on one of the events in the list
 | 
			
		||||
      selects the event, and displays its information at the top of
 | 
			
		||||
      the window.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Clicking on the internet address displayed at the top part of
 | 
			
		||||
      the window will cause <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> to attempt
 | 
			
		||||
      to display the site using the GNOME default browser.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      An internet address may be added by clicking on the
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Add</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button. This displays a form that
 | 
			
		||||
      allows you to enter the information about the internet
 | 
			
		||||
      address. This information consists of the web address (URL) and
 | 
			
		||||
      a description of the location.  The
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Edit/View</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button allows to view or alter
 | 
			
		||||
      the information of the currently displayed internet address. The
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Delete</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button allows you to delete the
 | 
			
		||||
      currently displayed internet address.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="LDSTAB"
 | 
			
		||||
>LDS Tab</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      If you have chosen to enable support for the LDS (Latter Day Saints)
 | 
			
		||||
      ordinances, the <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>LDS</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> tab is visible, and can
 | 
			
		||||
      be selected. This tab allows you to enter specific information used 
 | 
			
		||||
      by the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter Day Saints.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="EP_LDS-FIG"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="ep_lds.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 14. LDS Tab</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="personlist.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="familyview.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>People View</TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Family View</TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,338 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>Family View</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.64
 | 
			
		||||
"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="GRAMPS User Manual"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Editing a person's data"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="editpersondata.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Pedigree View"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="pedigreeview.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS User Manual</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="editpersondata.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="80%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="pedigreeview.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="FAMILYVIEW"
 | 
			
		||||
>Family View</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    The Family View window displays the spouses, parents, and children
 | 
			
		||||
    of the active person. At any time, you can return to this view
 | 
			
		||||
    either by pressing the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Family</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button at the
 | 
			
		||||
    top of the screen, or by choosing the
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>View</B
 | 
			
		||||
>-><B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
 | 
			
		||||
>Family View</B
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
    entry from the menus. 
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="FAMILYVIEW-FIG"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="familyview.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 15. Family View</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    In the Family View, the family information related to the active
 | 
			
		||||
    person is displayed. This information falls into two categories:
 | 
			
		||||
    families in which the person is a child, and families in which the
 | 
			
		||||
    person is a spouse or parent.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="AP_PARENTS"
 | 
			
		||||
>Relationships to Parents</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      On the right hand side of the window displays the parents of the
 | 
			
		||||
      active person. By default, a birth relationship is
 | 
			
		||||
      assumed. <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> supports multiple
 | 
			
		||||
      family relationships for each person. For example, a person may
 | 
			
		||||
      have natural birth parents and adopted parents. In this case, an
 | 
			
		||||
      option menu will appear below the parents names, allowing you to
 | 
			
		||||
      choose which set of parents you wish to view.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
> 
 | 
			
		||||
      Pressing the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Add/Edit Parents</B
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
      allows you to choose the active person's parents and specify the
 | 
			
		||||
      person's relationship to the parents.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Pressing the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Delete Parents</B
 | 
			
		||||
> does not
 | 
			
		||||
      remove the parents from the database, but instead deletes the
 | 
			
		||||
      relationship between the active person and the currently displayed
 | 
			
		||||
      parents.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      To right of the names of the parents are two "arrow"
 | 
			
		||||
      buttons. Selecting the button next to the father changes the
 | 
			
		||||
      father to the active person, and displays the fathers
 | 
			
		||||
      information in the Family View window. Similarly, selecting the
 | 
			
		||||
      button next to the mother changes the mother to the active
 | 
			
		||||
      person.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      To the left of the parents' names are buttons indicating the
 | 
			
		||||
      relationship to the active person. These are typically labeled
 | 
			
		||||
      "Father" and "Mother", but in some cases may simply be labeled
 | 
			
		||||
      "Parent". Pressing one of these buttons will display the
 | 
			
		||||
      <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Edit Person</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> for the corresponding person.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="SP_RELATIONSHIPS"
 | 
			
		||||
>Marriage/Relationship Information</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      On the left side of the window, below the active person's name,
 | 
			
		||||
      is the information related to the person's marriages and
 | 
			
		||||
      relationships.  If the person has one or no relationships, the
 | 
			
		||||
      spouse will appear within a non-editable text box. If more than
 | 
			
		||||
      one relationship exists, the text box will be replaced with an
 | 
			
		||||
      option menu that allows you to select the relationship to view.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Between the active person and the relationship information is a
 | 
			
		||||
      button with two arrows. Pressing this button will exchange the
 | 
			
		||||
      active person and spouse on the display. The currently displayed
 | 
			
		||||
      spouse will become the active person, and the family information
 | 
			
		||||
      on the right hand side of the screen will change to reflect
 | 
			
		||||
      this.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Pressing the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Spouse</B
 | 
			
		||||
> next to the spouse's
 | 
			
		||||
      name will display the currently displayed spouse's information
 | 
			
		||||
      in an <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Edit Person</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> dialog, allowing you
 | 
			
		||||
      change the information
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Pressing the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Add</B
 | 
			
		||||
> located below the entry
 | 
			
		||||
      for the spouse's name allows a new relationship to be
 | 
			
		||||
      added. This gives you the opportunity to select and existing
 | 
			
		||||
      person or to add a new person as the new spouse. The type of
 | 
			
		||||
      relationship can also be specified. All relationship types,
 | 
			
		||||
      except "Partners" require that the spouses be of opposite
 | 
			
		||||
      sex. The "Partners" relationship type requires that the spouses
 | 
			
		||||
      be of the same sex.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Pressing the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Edit</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button allows you to
 | 
			
		||||
      edit the information related to the marriage. The information
 | 
			
		||||
      includes events, attributes, and images.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      The <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Remove</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button removes the current
 | 
			
		||||
      spouse from the relationship. If no children exist in the
 | 
			
		||||
      relationship, the entire relationship is removed. If children
 | 
			
		||||
      exist in the relationship, the current spouse is removed,
 | 
			
		||||
      and the children remain in a family with the active person as the
 | 
			
		||||
      only parent.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="SP_CHILDREN"
 | 
			
		||||
>Children of a Relationship</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      The bottom of the window contains the list of children related
 | 
			
		||||
      to the active person and the currently selected spouse. Clicking
 | 
			
		||||
      on an entry in the list makes that child the active child.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Clicking the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Add New Child</B
 | 
			
		||||
> creates a new
 | 
			
		||||
      child and adds him or her as a child of the current
 | 
			
		||||
      relationship. Clicking the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Add Existing
 | 
			
		||||
      Child</B
 | 
			
		||||
> allows you to select an existing person and
 | 
			
		||||
      assign the person as a child of the current
 | 
			
		||||
      relationship. Clicking the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Remove Child</B
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
      removes the active child from the current relationship, but does
 | 
			
		||||
      not delete the person from the database.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Double clicking on an entry in the list brings up the
 | 
			
		||||
      <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Edit Person</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> dialog for the child.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      You are able to make the selected child the active person by
 | 
			
		||||
      clicking the arrow button next to the child list. The
 | 
			
		||||
      highlighted child in the child list becomes the active person.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="editpersondata.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="pedigreeview.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Editing a person's data</TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Pedigree View</TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,169 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>Running GRAMPS for the first time.</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.64
 | 
			
		||||
"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="GRAMPS User Manual"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="GRAMPS User Manual"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Getting Started"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="gettingstarted.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS User Manual</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="80%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="gettingstarted.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="FIRSTTIME"
 | 
			
		||||
>Running GRAMPS for the first time.</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    The first time you run the program,
 | 
			
		||||
    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> will display its Getting Started
 | 
			
		||||
    screens.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="DRUIDPG1"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="druidpg1.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 1. Getting Started screen, page 1</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> will guide you through a few pages
 | 
			
		||||
    that prompt you for some setup information. The information it requests
 | 
			
		||||
    includes information about yourself and your preferences.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    Although <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> requests information about
 | 
			
		||||
    your, this information is used only so that it can create valid GEDCOM
 | 
			
		||||
    output files. A valid GEDCOM file requires information about the file"s
 | 
			
		||||
    creator. If you chose, you may leave the information empty.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="gettingstarted.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS User Manual</TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Getting Started</TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,334 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>Generating Reports</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.64
 | 
			
		||||
"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="GRAMPS User Manual"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Customization"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="prefs.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Running Tools"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="runtools.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS User Manual</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="prefs.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="80%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="runtools.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENREPORTS"
 | 
			
		||||
>Generating Reports</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> can produce a wide variety of
 | 
			
		||||
    reports. A new report generator can be written by the user without
 | 
			
		||||
    modifying the main program. For this reason, there may be more
 | 
			
		||||
    reports available than are documented by this manual.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="REPORT-FIG"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="reportsel.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 41. Report Generation Dialog</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    Unlike many genealogy programs, <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
    does not directly print reports. Instead,
 | 
			
		||||
    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> produces reports in formats that
 | 
			
		||||
    are understood by other programs.  These formats include
 | 
			
		||||
    OpenOffice, AbiWord, PDF, and HTML, among others. This allows the
 | 
			
		||||
    generated reports to be modified after they are generated, stored
 | 
			
		||||
    for use at a later time, or e-mailed to another person.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    After selecting the report you would like generated there are
 | 
			
		||||
    options you must select.  In the Save As option specify your file
 | 
			
		||||
    name (use /full path/filename to specify a different directory
 | 
			
		||||
    than in your Default Report Directory preference in the
 | 
			
		||||
    preferences).  The next step is to select the Report Format.
 | 
			
		||||
    After choosing the Format you can select the style you would like
 | 
			
		||||
    to use for your report (this does not apply to the HTML format).
 | 
			
		||||
    You can Add/Edit/Delete a style for that particular report by
 | 
			
		||||
    clicking the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Style Editor</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button.
 | 
			
		||||
    Selecting one of those options you can then change the font (font
 | 
			
		||||
    face, size, color, and options) for each Paragraph Style along
 | 
			
		||||
    with the Paragraph Options (Alignment, background color, margins,
 | 
			
		||||
    and borders).  Once you are satisfied with the style you are ready
 | 
			
		||||
    to proceed with the generation of your report.  The next step is
 | 
			
		||||
    to choose the options (if any for that specific report) and then
 | 
			
		||||
    Choose the Template (for HTML format only) and click OK.  Your
 | 
			
		||||
    report will now be in default report directory (unless otherwise
 | 
			
		||||
    specified). 
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="HTMLTEMPLATES"
 | 
			
		||||
>Using HTML templates</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Many programs exist to convert GEDCOM files into HTML files that
 | 
			
		||||
      can be viewed in a web browser. Most of these programs generate
 | 
			
		||||
      HTML files according to their own predefined style. Since most
 | 
			
		||||
      people have a style that they prefer, they are left with the
 | 
			
		||||
      option of modifying hundreds of files by hand.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      To solve this problem, <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> allows
 | 
			
		||||
      the user to specify a template to be used for generating HTML
 | 
			
		||||
      files.  At the time the report is generated, if HTML is selected
 | 
			
		||||
      as the target format, the user can select an HTML template to be
 | 
			
		||||
      used.  Since the template is chosen at report generation time, a
 | 
			
		||||
      different template may be chosen each time, allowing the user to
 | 
			
		||||
      change the appearance of the generated files at any time.
 | 
			
		||||
      Nearly any existing HTML file can be used as an HTML template
 | 
			
		||||
      for <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      When a file has been established as the HTML template file,
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> uses the template for each
 | 
			
		||||
      file that it generates. <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> starts
 | 
			
		||||
      each file by copying data from the template until it reaches the
 | 
			
		||||
      HTML comment, which it uses as a marker.  At that point,
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> inserts its data into the
 | 
			
		||||
      output file. <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> the continues
 | 
			
		||||
      reading the until it reaches a second comment that tells it to
 | 
			
		||||
      resume copying from the template.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> uses the string
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
><!-- START --></TT
 | 
			
		||||
> to indicate where it
 | 
			
		||||
      should start inserting its information, and the string
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
><!-- STOP --></TT
 | 
			
		||||
> to indicate where it
 | 
			
		||||
      should resume copying data from the template.  The effect is
 | 
			
		||||
      that <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> will create a new
 | 
			
		||||
      document, replacing everything between the <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
><!--
 | 
			
		||||
      START --></TT
 | 
			
		||||
> and <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FUNCTION"
 | 
			
		||||
><!-- STOP
 | 
			
		||||
      --></TT
 | 
			
		||||
> comments with the report information.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      The comment markers should be at the beginning of a line in the
 | 
			
		||||
      HTML template file.  Adding the comments to an existing HTML
 | 
			
		||||
      document will not affect the original HTML document in any way.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      If no HTML template is specified, or if the specified template
 | 
			
		||||
      cannot be read, <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> will use a
 | 
			
		||||
      default, predefined template.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="TEMPLATEEXAMPLE"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#E0E0E0"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
><PRE
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
 | 
			
		||||
><HTML>
 | 
			
		||||
<HEAD>
 | 
			
		||||
<TITLE>
 | 
			
		||||
This is my Title
 | 
			
		||||
</TITLE>
 | 
			
		||||
</HEAD>
 | 
			
		||||
<BODY BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF">
 | 
			
		||||
<P>
 | 
			
		||||
This is a simple template.  This text will appear in the html output.
 | 
			
		||||
</P>
 | 
			
		||||
<!-- START -->
 | 
			
		||||
<P>
 | 
			
		||||
This is where GRAMPS will place its report information. Any 
 | 
			
		||||
information between the two comments, including this paragraph,
 | 
			
		||||
will not appear in the GRAMPS generated output.
 | 
			
		||||
</P>
 | 
			
		||||
<!-- STOP -->
 | 
			
		||||
<P>
 | 
			
		||||
This text, since it appears after the stop comment, will also
 | 
			
		||||
appear in every GRAMPS generated file.
 | 
			
		||||
</P>
 | 
			
		||||
</BODY>
 | 
			
		||||
</HTML>
 | 
			
		||||
        </PRE
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 42. Sample HTML Template Example</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="prefs.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="runtools.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Customization</TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Running Tools</TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,296 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>Getting Started</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.64
 | 
			
		||||
"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="GRAMPS User Manual"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Running GRAMPS for the first time."
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="firsttime.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="People View"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="personlist.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS User Manual</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="firsttime.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="80%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="personlist.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GETTINGSTARTED"
 | 
			
		||||
>Getting Started</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    Starting <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> opens the
 | 
			
		||||
    <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Main window</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
>, shown in <A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="gettingstarted.html#MAINWINDOW-FIG"
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 2</A
 | 
			
		||||
>. You will be prompted to either open an
 | 
			
		||||
    existing database, or to create a new
 | 
			
		||||
    database. <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> requires that a
 | 
			
		||||
    database always be open.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="MAINWINDOW-FIG"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="mainwin.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 2. GRAMPS Main Window</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="STARTIMPORT"
 | 
			
		||||
>Importing data</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      If you already have a family file created using another
 | 
			
		||||
      genealogy program you can import your GEDCOM file into GRAMPS.
 | 
			
		||||
      To do this you select <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>File</B
 | 
			
		||||
>-><B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUISUBMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>Import</B
 | 
			
		||||
>-><B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
 | 
			
		||||
>Import from
 | 
			
		||||
      GEDCOM</B
 | 
			
		||||
>.  The <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>GEDCOM
 | 
			
		||||
      Import</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> box will open. Select <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>New
 | 
			
		||||
      Database</B
 | 
			
		||||
> and click the
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Browse...</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button to select your saved
 | 
			
		||||
      GEDCOM file (<TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
 | 
			
		||||
><I
 | 
			
		||||
>filename.ged</I
 | 
			
		||||
></TT
 | 
			
		||||
>). Click
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>OK</B
 | 
			
		||||
> to select the file and then click
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>OK</B
 | 
			
		||||
> to import the file. The
 | 
			
		||||
      <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>GEDCOM Import Status</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> will tell you what
 | 
			
		||||
      the importer is doing and a little bit about your file (file
 | 
			
		||||
      location, which program created it, the version, Encoding,
 | 
			
		||||
      Number of Families, Number of People, and the Number of Errors).
 | 
			
		||||
      Once the Importer is done, you can click
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Close</B
 | 
			
		||||
> and start editing/adding to your
 | 
			
		||||
      file.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="NOIMPORT"
 | 
			
		||||
>Entering Data</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      If you have never used a genealogy program or you do not have a
 | 
			
		||||
      GEDCOM file to import, you can start creating your database
 | 
			
		||||
      right away. From the main window click the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Add
 | 
			
		||||
      Person</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button and the <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Edit
 | 
			
		||||
      Person</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> dialog will open.  Enter in the information
 | 
			
		||||
      you have on the first person.  Start with their general
 | 
			
		||||
      information (Name, Birth and Death Date/Place) and then move on
 | 
			
		||||
      to the <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Names</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
>,
 | 
			
		||||
      <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Events</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
>,
 | 
			
		||||
      <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Attributes</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
>,
 | 
			
		||||
      <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Addresses</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
>, <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Notes</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
>,
 | 
			
		||||
      <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Gallery</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
>, and
 | 
			
		||||
      <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Internet</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> tabs and fill in the known
 | 
			
		||||
      information you have.  Some of the information you enter has a
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Source</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button and/or a
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Note</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button.  These buttons are there to
 | 
			
		||||
      add more information (<B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Source</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button to
 | 
			
		||||
      add the source of where you acquired the information and the
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Note</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button to add more detail to the
 | 
			
		||||
      information)
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="firsttime.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="personlist.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Running GRAMPS for the first time.</TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>People View</TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,258 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS User Manual</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.64
 | 
			
		||||
"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Running GRAMPS for the first time."
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="firsttime.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="ARTICLE"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="ARTICLE"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="TITLEPAGE"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="TITLE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="AEN2"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS User Manual</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="COPYRIGHT"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="ln7.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Copyright</A
 | 
			
		||||
> © 2001 by Donald N. Allingham</P
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="75%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="CENTER"
 | 
			
		||||
COLOR="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
SIZE="1"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="TOC"
 | 
			
		||||
><DL
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Table of Contents</B
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html#INTRO"
 | 
			
		||||
>Introduction</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="firsttime.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Running GRAMPS for the first time.</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="gettingstarted.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Getting Started</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="personlist.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>People View</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="editpersondata.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Editing a person's data</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="familyview.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Family View</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="pedigreeview.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Pedigree View</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="sourcelist.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Source View</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="placelist.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Place View</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="mediaview.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Media View</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="bookmarks.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Bookmarking People</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="revisoncontrol.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Using Revision Control</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="prefs.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Customization</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="genreports.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Generating Reports</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="runtools.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Running Tools</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="authors.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Authors</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="license.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>License</A
 | 
			
		||||
></DT
 | 
			
		||||
></DL
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="INTRO"
 | 
			
		||||
>Introduction</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> is an acronym for the
 | 
			
		||||
    Genealogical Research and Analysis Management Programming System.
 | 
			
		||||
    It was conceived under the concept that most genealogy programs
 | 
			
		||||
    were designed to provide the researcher the capability to input
 | 
			
		||||
    information related to a particular family tree.  Most of these
 | 
			
		||||
    programs have allowed for the arranging and storing of information
 | 
			
		||||
    consistent with the GEDCOM standards.  They usually provide a
 | 
			
		||||
    means for displaying descendant or ancestral relationships by
 | 
			
		||||
    means of graphical displays, charts, or reports.  These may be
 | 
			
		||||
    augmented with pictures or other media to enhance the data.  Most
 | 
			
		||||
    provide for inputting data on unconnected individuals/families
 | 
			
		||||
    that may or may not have a relationship to the primary surname
 | 
			
		||||
    being researched.  Various other enhancements may also be provided
 | 
			
		||||
    in the genealogical program that allows for different degrees of
 | 
			
		||||
    importing and exporting data from other programs and printing of
 | 
			
		||||
    the data contained in the various reports.  GRAMPS, on the other
 | 
			
		||||
    hand, attempts to provide all of the common capabilities of these
 | 
			
		||||
    programs, but, more importantly, to provide a capability not
 | 
			
		||||
    common to these programs.  This is the ability to input any bits
 | 
			
		||||
    and pieces of information directly into GRAMPS and
 | 
			
		||||
    rearrange/manipulate any/all data events in the entire data base
 | 
			
		||||
    (in any order or sequence) to assist the user in doing research,
 | 
			
		||||
    analysis and correlation with the potential of filling
 | 
			
		||||
    relationship gaps.  In short, a tool that provides a way to input
 | 
			
		||||
    all your research into one place and do your analysis and
 | 
			
		||||
    correlation using the speed, power, and accuracy of your computer
 | 
			
		||||
    instead of pencils and unmanageable reams of paper.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    To run <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>, select
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUISUBMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>Programs</B
 | 
			
		||||
>-><B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUISUBMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>Applications</B
 | 
			
		||||
>-><B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
 | 
			
		||||
>gramps</B
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
    from the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>Main Menu</B
 | 
			
		||||
>, or type
 | 
			
		||||
    <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
 | 
			
		||||
>gramps</B
 | 
			
		||||
> on the command line.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    This document describes version 0.7.2 of
 | 
			
		||||
    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="firsttime.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Running GRAMPS for the first time.</TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,189 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>License</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.64
 | 
			
		||||
"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="GRAMPS User Manual"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Authors"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="authors.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS User Manual</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="authors.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="80%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="LICENSE"
 | 
			
		||||
>License</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
 | 
			
		||||
    modify it under the terms of the <A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="gnome-help:gpl"
 | 
			
		||||
TARGET="_top"
 | 
			
		||||
> <I
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="CITETITLE"
 | 
			
		||||
>GNU General Public
 | 
			
		||||
    License</I
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
> as published by the Free Software
 | 
			
		||||
    Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option)
 | 
			
		||||
    any later version.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
 | 
			
		||||
    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
 | 
			
		||||
    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
 | 
			
		||||
    <I
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="CITETITLE"
 | 
			
		||||
>GNU General Public License</I
 | 
			
		||||
> for more
 | 
			
		||||
    details.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    A copy of the <I
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="CITETITLE"
 | 
			
		||||
>GNU General Public License</I
 | 
			
		||||
> is
 | 
			
		||||
    included as an appendix to the <I
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="CITETITLE"
 | 
			
		||||
>GNOME Users
 | 
			
		||||
    Guide</I
 | 
			
		||||
>.  You may also obtain a copy of the
 | 
			
		||||
    <I
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="CITETITLE"
 | 
			
		||||
>GNU General Public License</I
 | 
			
		||||
> from the Free
 | 
			
		||||
    Software Foundation by visiting <A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="http://www.fsf.org"
 | 
			
		||||
TARGET="_top"
 | 
			
		||||
>their Web site</A
 | 
			
		||||
> or by writing to
 | 
			
		||||
    <P
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="ADDRESS"
 | 
			
		||||
>    Free Software Foundation, Inc.<br>
 | 
			
		||||
    <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="STREET"
 | 
			
		||||
>59 Temple Place</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> - Suite 330<br>
 | 
			
		||||
    <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="CITY"
 | 
			
		||||
>Boston</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
>, <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="STATE"
 | 
			
		||||
>MA</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="POSTCODE"
 | 
			
		||||
>02111-1307</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
><br>
 | 
			
		||||
    <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="COUNTRY"
 | 
			
		||||
>USA</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
><br>
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="authors.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Authors</TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,129 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.64
 | 
			
		||||
"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="GRAMPS User Manual"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="UP"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="GRAMPS User Manual"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html#AEN2"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Running GRAMPS for the first time."
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="firsttime.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS User Manual</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="LEGALNOTICE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="LEGALNOTICE"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
 | 
			
		||||
    under the terms of the <A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="gnome-help:fdl"
 | 
			
		||||
TARGET="_top"
 | 
			
		||||
><I
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="CITETITLE"
 | 
			
		||||
>GNU Free Documentation
 | 
			
		||||
    License</I
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
>, Version 1.1 or any later version 
 | 
			
		||||
    published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, 
 | 
			
		||||
    no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license
 | 
			
		||||
    can be found <A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="gnome-help:fdl"
 | 
			
		||||
TARGET="_top"
 | 
			
		||||
>here</A
 | 
			
		||||
>.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and
 | 
			
		||||
    services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any
 | 
			
		||||
    GNOME documentation, and those trademarks are made aware to the members
 | 
			
		||||
    of the GNOME Documentation Project, the names have been printed in caps
 | 
			
		||||
    or initial caps.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html#AEN2"
 | 
			
		||||
>Up</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,331 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>Media View</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.64
 | 
			
		||||
"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="GRAMPS User Manual"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Place View"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="placelist.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Bookmarking People"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="bookmarks.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS User Manual</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="placelist.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="80%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="bookmarks.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="MEDIAVIEW"
 | 
			
		||||
>Media View</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    The Media View window displays the files associated with the
 | 
			
		||||
    database.  Typically, these files are images, but
 | 
			
		||||
    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> allows you to attach any type of
 | 
			
		||||
    file to the database. <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> refers to
 | 
			
		||||
    attached files as media objects.  You can access the Media View at
 | 
			
		||||
    any time by either pressing the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Media</B
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
    button at the top of the screen, or by choosing the
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>View</B
 | 
			
		||||
>-><B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
 | 
			
		||||
>Media</B
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
    entry from the menus.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="MEDIAVIEW-FIG"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="mediaview.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 20. Media View</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="AEN400"
 | 
			
		||||
>Media Objects</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Media objects can be either local or external to a
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> database. If
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> is told to import an object as
 | 
			
		||||
      a local object, it will make its own copy of the file in the
 | 
			
		||||
      database directory. If the object is not imported as a local
 | 
			
		||||
      object, the original file is used.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      There are advantages and disadvantages to both methods. If the
 | 
			
		||||
      object is local, then if the original file is moved or deleted,
 | 
			
		||||
      then <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> will still have its own
 | 
			
		||||
      copy. However, this is at the price of having two copies of the
 | 
			
		||||
      file. If the file is not imported as a local object, then a copy
 | 
			
		||||
      is not made, saving disk space. However, altering or deleting
 | 
			
		||||
      the original copy will affect the
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> database.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="AEN408"
 | 
			
		||||
>Adding a Media Object</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Media objects can be imported in several ways. Adding an object
 | 
			
		||||
      to any gallery adds the object to the Media View. The gallery is
 | 
			
		||||
      will actually contain a reference to the object in the Media
 | 
			
		||||
      View. 
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Objects may also be added using the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Add Media
 | 
			
		||||
      Object</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button. This will add the object to the Media
 | 
			
		||||
      View, but not to any gallery. When you select the file to be
 | 
			
		||||
      added, a preview will be displayed in the preview window. If the
 | 
			
		||||
      file is an image, the image will be displayed. Otherwise, an
 | 
			
		||||
      icon representing the file type will be displayed. In the dialog
 | 
			
		||||
      box, you may choose to either import the object as a local
 | 
			
		||||
      object, or leave it as an external object.
 | 
			
		||||
      <DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="ADDMEDIA"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="addmedia.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 21. Add Media Object Dialog Box</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Finally, you may drag-and-drop an object from either a file
 | 
			
		||||
      manager or a web browser. If the object is dropped into a
 | 
			
		||||
      gallery, then a reference is made in the gallery, and the object
 | 
			
		||||
      appears in the Media View. If the object is dropped directly
 | 
			
		||||
      into the Media View, then it appears in the Media View, but will
 | 
			
		||||
      not appear in a gallery. Currently, all objects imported via
 | 
			
		||||
      drag-and-drop are imported as external (not local) objects.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="AEN419"
 | 
			
		||||
>Making a Reference to a Media Object</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Once an object is in the Media View, it is possible to make a
 | 
			
		||||
      reference to it in any gallery. You may place the object in as
 | 
			
		||||
      many galleries as you like, and only one copy of the file will
 | 
			
		||||
      exist.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      To make a reference to a media object in a gallery, you may
 | 
			
		||||
      simply drag-and-drop the object from the Media View directly to
 | 
			
		||||
      a gallery. The object will then appear in the
 | 
			
		||||
      gallery. Similarly, you may drag-and-drop from one gallery to
 | 
			
		||||
      another gallery, and a new object reference is created in the
 | 
			
		||||
      target gallery.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="AEN423"
 | 
			
		||||
>Changing a Media Object's Properties</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Media objects have global and local properties. The title of the
 | 
			
		||||
      object is a global property. It may only be changed from the
 | 
			
		||||
      Media View, and it will affect all references. An object also
 | 
			
		||||
      has a global note and a set of user defined global attributes.
 | 
			
		||||
      A reference in a gallery may a have a local note and local
 | 
			
		||||
      attributes as well. All references share the global properties,
 | 
			
		||||
      but each gallery has its own set of notes a attributes.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      The global note can be used to provide a general
 | 
			
		||||
      description. For example, in a family reunion image, you may
 | 
			
		||||
      wish to use the global note to indicate the place, date, and
 | 
			
		||||
      occasion of the photograph. In a local note in Aunt Martha's
 | 
			
		||||
      gallery, you may wish to add a local note indicating that
 | 
			
		||||
      "Aunt Martha is the third person from the right in the
 | 
			
		||||
      second row".
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      The global properties may be changed by selecting the
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Edit Media Object</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button.
 | 
			
		||||
      <DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GLOBALMEDIA"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="globalmedia.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 22. Edit a Media Object's Global Properties</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="placelist.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="bookmarks.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Place View</TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Bookmarking People</TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,211 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>Pedigree View</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.64
 | 
			
		||||
"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="GRAMPS User Manual"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Family View"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="familyview.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Source View"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="sourcelist.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS User Manual</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="familyview.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="80%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="sourcelist.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PEDIGREEVIEW"
 | 
			
		||||
>Pedigree View</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    The Pedigree View window displays the active person, the active
 | 
			
		||||
    person's parents, and the active parent's grandparents in a
 | 
			
		||||
    somewhat graphical manner. At any time, you can return to this
 | 
			
		||||
    view either by pressing the Pedigree button at the top of the
 | 
			
		||||
    screen, or by choosing the
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>View</B
 | 
			
		||||
>-><B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
 | 
			
		||||
>Pedigree</B
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
    entry from the menus.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PEDIGREEVIEW-FIG"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="pedegreeview.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 16. Pedigree View</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    Moving the mouse over a displayed name will display additional
 | 
			
		||||
    information about a person, including their date of birth and date
 | 
			
		||||
    of death. Double-clicking the box will display the <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Edit
 | 
			
		||||
    Person</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> dialog box for the person. Holding down the
 | 
			
		||||
    Shift key while double clicking will will make that person the
 | 
			
		||||
    active person.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    Navigation around the tree can be accomplished several
 | 
			
		||||
    ways. Clicking on the arrow next to the active person will display
 | 
			
		||||
    a menu listing the children of the active person. Selecting a
 | 
			
		||||
    person from this list will change the active person to the
 | 
			
		||||
    selected child, effectively shifting the pedigree view to the
 | 
			
		||||
    left, or down one generation. Clicking one of the arrow buttons on
 | 
			
		||||
    the left side of the screen will make the select either the active
 | 
			
		||||
    person's father (top button) or mother (bottom button),
 | 
			
		||||
    effectively shifting the pedigree view to the right, or up one
 | 
			
		||||
    generation. If the active person does not have any children, then
 | 
			
		||||
    the button on the left-hand side of the screen will not
 | 
			
		||||
    appear. Similarly, if the active person does have a father or
 | 
			
		||||
    mother, the corresponding button on the right-hand side of the
 | 
			
		||||
    screen will not appear.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="NAVFIGURE-FIG"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="pedegreesel.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 17. Navigation</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    As a quick short cut, double clicking on a line between two people
 | 
			
		||||
    will make the person on the right-hand side of the line the active
 | 
			
		||||
    person. <A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="pedigreeview.html#NAVFIGURE-FIG"
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 17</A
 | 
			
		||||
> shows navigation using this
 | 
			
		||||
    method. When the mouse is over one of the lines connecting
 | 
			
		||||
    individuals, the line widens and becomes highlighted. In this
 | 
			
		||||
    case, double clicking on the line would make Hjalmar Smith the
 | 
			
		||||
    active person.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="familyview.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="sourcelist.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Family View</TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Source View</TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,309 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>People View</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.64
 | 
			
		||||
"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="GRAMPS User Manual"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Getting Started"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="gettingstarted.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Editing a person's data"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="editpersondata.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS User Manual</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="gettingstarted.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="80%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="editpersondata.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PERSONLIST"
 | 
			
		||||
>People View</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    The People View window is the initial view seen on the main
 | 
			
		||||
    window.  It displays the name, gender, birth date, and death
 | 
			
		||||
    date of all individuals in the database.  At any time, you can
 | 
			
		||||
    return to this view either by pressing the
 | 
			
		||||
    <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>People</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button at the top of the screen, or
 | 
			
		||||
    by choosing the
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>View</B
 | 
			
		||||
>-><B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
 | 
			
		||||
>People</B
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
    entry from the menus.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PEOPLEVIEW-FIG"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="peoplelist.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 3. People View</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="SELEDITINDV"
 | 
			
		||||
>Selecting and Editing Individuals</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      The People View lists the individuals in the database. An
 | 
			
		||||
      individual can be selected as the active person by clicking on
 | 
			
		||||
      an entry in the list. Once a person has been selected as the
 | 
			
		||||
      active person, the person's name appears in the status bar in
 | 
			
		||||
      the lower left hand corner of the window.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Once the active person has been selected, pressing the
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Edit Person</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button will display the
 | 
			
		||||
      <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Edit Person</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> dialog allowing you to edit
 | 
			
		||||
      the individual's personal information.  If the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Edit
 | 
			
		||||
      Person</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button is pressed without an active person
 | 
			
		||||
      being set, a blank <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Edit Person</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> dialog is
 | 
			
		||||
      presented, allowing you to enter a new person.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Double-clicking on a entry in the list will set the active
 | 
			
		||||
      person and bring up the individual in the <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Edit
 | 
			
		||||
      Person</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> dialog.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Pressing the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Add Person</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button will
 | 
			
		||||
      display a blank <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Edit Person</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> dialog,
 | 
			
		||||
      allowing you to add a new person to the database.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      If the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Delete Person</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button is pressed,
 | 
			
		||||
      the active person and all of the personal information related to
 | 
			
		||||
      the active person are removed from the database.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="AEN111"
 | 
			
		||||
>Applying Filters</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> allows you to apply filters to
 | 
			
		||||
      the People View. When a filter is applied, the People View will
 | 
			
		||||
      only display the entries matching the filter. All of the entries
 | 
			
		||||
      remain in the database, but some entries may be temporarily hidden.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      There are up to three parts to a filter. The first part is the
 | 
			
		||||
      selection of the filter to be applied. A filter is selected from
 | 
			
		||||
      the option menu directly above the People View. The second part
 | 
			
		||||
      is an optional argument. This qualifier provides more specific
 | 
			
		||||
      information for the filter. Many filters do not require the
 | 
			
		||||
      argument, and it will not be displayed if it is not needed. If
 | 
			
		||||
      the argument is required, a text box with a descriptive label
 | 
			
		||||
      will appear.  The third part of the filter is the invert
 | 
			
		||||
      selection.  When this option is selected,
 | 
			
		||||
      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> will display the entries that
 | 
			
		||||
      do not match the filter.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="FILTER-FIG"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="filter.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 4. Filter that reqires an argument</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      A filter is not applied until the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Apply</B
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
      button is pressed.  The filter will remain in effect until the
 | 
			
		||||
      next time the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Apply</B
 | 
			
		||||
> button is pressed.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="AEN125"
 | 
			
		||||
>Sorting</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Four columns are shown in the People View display. The entries
 | 
			
		||||
      in the list can be sorted by three of the fields: Name, Birth
 | 
			
		||||
      Date, or Death Date.  Clicking on the column label will cause
 | 
			
		||||
      the list to be re-sorted by that column.  Arrows on the label
 | 
			
		||||
      indicate whether the list is sorted by ascending or descending
 | 
			
		||||
      order.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      If the list is already sorted by a particular column, clicking
 | 
			
		||||
      on the same column label will switch the sorting order.  For
 | 
			
		||||
      example, if the list is currently sorted in ascending order by
 | 
			
		||||
      Name, clicking on the Name column header will re-sort the list
 | 
			
		||||
      in descending order.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="gettingstarted.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="editpersondata.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Getting Started</TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Editing a person's data</TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,164 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>Place View</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.64
 | 
			
		||||
"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="GRAMPS User Manual"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Source View"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="sourcelist.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Media View"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="mediaview.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS User Manual</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="sourcelist.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="80%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="mediaview.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PLACELIST"
 | 
			
		||||
>Place View</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    The Place View window displays the different sources that have
 | 
			
		||||
    been entered into the database. At any time, you can return to
 | 
			
		||||
    this view either by pressing the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Places</B
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
    button at the top of the screen, or by choosing the
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>View</B
 | 
			
		||||
>-><B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
 | 
			
		||||
>Places</B
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
    entry from the menus.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PLACEVIEW-FIG"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="placelist.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 19. Place View</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    From this screen you are able to Add, Edit, and Delete places.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="sourcelist.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="mediaview.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Source View</TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Media View</TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,607 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>Customization</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.64
 | 
			
		||||
"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="GRAMPS User Manual"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Using Revision Control"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="revisoncontrol.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Generating Reports"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="genreports.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS User Manual</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="revisoncontrol.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="80%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="genreports.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS"
 | 
			
		||||
>Customization</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    To change the application settings, select
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>Settings</B
 | 
			
		||||
>-><B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
 | 
			
		||||
>Preferences...</B
 | 
			
		||||
>.  This opens the
 | 
			
		||||
    <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Preferences</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> dialog, shown in <A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="prefs.html#PREFS_MAIN"
 | 
			
		||||
>the section called <I
 | 
			
		||||
>Preferences Dialog</I
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
>.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_MAIN"
 | 
			
		||||
>Preferences Dialog</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_MAIN_FIG"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="prefs_main.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 28. Preferences Dialog</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> groups is options into
 | 
			
		||||
      categories visible in the left hand side of the
 | 
			
		||||
      dialog. Selecting one of these entries will display the
 | 
			
		||||
      corresponding settings in the right hand side of the dialog.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_GEN"
 | 
			
		||||
>General Database options</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_GEN_FIG"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="prefs_gen.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 29. General Database options</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      The General Database page contains basic information to
 | 
			
		||||
      control the operation of <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>General Database options</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
><DL
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
>Automatically load last database</DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DD
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	    With this selected it will automatically load your last
 | 
			
		||||
	    database.
 | 
			
		||||
            </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DD
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
>Do not compress XML data file</DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DD
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> normally compresses its
 | 
			
		||||
	    data file to conserve disk space. If you do not wish to
 | 
			
		||||
	    have the file compressed, selecting this option will cause
 | 
			
		||||
	    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> to leave the file
 | 
			
		||||
	    uncompressed.  This may be desirable if other applications
 | 
			
		||||
	    need to process the generated XML file.
 | 
			
		||||
  	    </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DD
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
>Autosave interval (minues)</DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DD
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	    If this value is set to a non-zero value, <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
	    will save an autosave file every few minutes, depending on the 
 | 
			
		||||
	    value set. If for some reason the execution of <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
	    is interupted, you can recover to the last autosave point.
 | 
			
		||||
  	    </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DD
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
>Default database directory</DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DD
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	    This value indicates the default directory for loading and saving
 | 
			
		||||
	    databases.
 | 
			
		||||
  	    </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DD
 | 
			
		||||
></DL
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_TAB1"
 | 
			
		||||
>Dates and Calendars</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_DATES"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="prefs_dates.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 30. Dates and Calendars</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      The <SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="INTERFACE"
 | 
			
		||||
>Dates and Calendars</SPAN
 | 
			
		||||
> page allows you to change the
 | 
			
		||||
      display and entry formats of dates. 
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Dates and Calendars options</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
><DL
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
>Display Formats</DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DD
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	    Allows you to choose your preferences for displaying dates
 | 
			
		||||
	    and names. Options exist for several different date
 | 
			
		||||
	    formats. Names can be displayed with either the given name
 | 
			
		||||
	    or the surname first. This option typically does not
 | 
			
		||||
	    affect lists that are sorted by last name, in which case
 | 
			
		||||
	    the surname is displayed first.
 | 
			
		||||
            </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DD
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
>Entry Formats</DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DD
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	    Numerical date formats can be ambiguous. Some people enter
 | 
			
		||||
	    the day, month, and year (European style), while others
 | 
			
		||||
	    prefer month, day, year (American style). Selecting the
 | 
			
		||||
	    option here informs <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> how
 | 
			
		||||
	    it should interpret numerical dates.
 | 
			
		||||
            </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DD
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
>Calendars</DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DD
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> can support calendars
 | 
			
		||||
	    other than the typical Gregorian calendar. If enabled,
 | 
			
		||||
	    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> will display a menu
 | 
			
		||||
	    allowing you to specify the calendar that a date
 | 
			
		||||
	    represents. Calendars currently supported are Gregorian,
 | 
			
		||||
	    Hebrew, Julian, and French Republican.
 | 
			
		||||
            </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DD
 | 
			
		||||
></DL
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_TAB2"
 | 
			
		||||
>Media Options</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_MEDIA"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="prefs_media.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 31. Media Options</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_TAB_IDS"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS ID Options</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_IDS"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="prefs_ids.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 32. GRAMPS ID Options</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_TAB_REV"
 | 
			
		||||
>Revision Control Options</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_REV"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="prefs_revision.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 33. Revision Control Options</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_TAB_DISP"
 | 
			
		||||
>General Display Options</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_DISP"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="prefs_disp.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 34. General Display Options</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_TAB_BARS"
 | 
			
		||||
>Tool and Status Bar Options</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_BARS"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="prefs_bars.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 35. Tool and Status Bar Options</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_TAB_COLORS"
 | 
			
		||||
>List Color Options</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_COLOR"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="prefs_colors.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 36. List Color Options</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_TAB_FIND"
 | 
			
		||||
>Find Options</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_FIND"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="prefs_find.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 37. Find Options</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_TAB4"
 | 
			
		||||
>Report Options</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_REPORT"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="prefs_report.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 38. Report Options</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Many of the reports that <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
      produces can be generated in different file formats and
 | 
			
		||||
      different paper sizes. Selecting a <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUILABEL"
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Preferred Output
 | 
			
		||||
      Format</B
 | 
			
		||||
></TT
 | 
			
		||||
> and a <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUILABEL"
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Preferred Output
 | 
			
		||||
      Format</B
 | 
			
		||||
></TT
 | 
			
		||||
> tells the report generator your
 | 
			
		||||
      preferences. It should be noted that a report generator might
 | 
			
		||||
      not support all possible formats.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_TAB3"
 | 
			
		||||
>Researcher Information</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_RESEARCH"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="prefs_research.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 39. Researcher Information</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      This is where you are able to change the information you entered
 | 
			
		||||
      when you started GRAMPS for the first time and was asked to
 | 
			
		||||
      enter in some information. (This information shows up in your
 | 
			
		||||
      GEDCOM files as being the researcher/author of the file)
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_TAB5"
 | 
			
		||||
>Data Guessing Options</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="PREFS_TAB_GUESS"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="prefs_guess.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 40. Data Guessing Options</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="revisoncontrol.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="genreports.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Using Revision Control</TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Generating Reports</TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,233 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>Using Revision Control</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.64
 | 
			
		||||
"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="GRAMPS User Manual"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Bookmarking People"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="bookmarks.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Customization"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="prefs.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS User Manual</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="bookmarks.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="80%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="prefs.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="REVISONCONTROL"
 | 
			
		||||
>Using Revision Control</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    Revision control allows you to keep a history of the changes that
 | 
			
		||||
    you have made to your database. Instead of needing to keep
 | 
			
		||||
    multiple sets of back up files, a single revision control database
 | 
			
		||||
    is maintained. At any point, you can revert back to a previously
 | 
			
		||||
    saved version.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> uses the standard
 | 
			
		||||
    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>RCS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> system to handle revisions.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    Revision control is enabled in the Revision Control tab of the
 | 
			
		||||
    preferences dialog. Once enabled, every save is logged into the
 | 
			
		||||
    revision control database. If you have enabled prompting for a
 | 
			
		||||
    comment, then a dialog box will be displayed on every save asking
 | 
			
		||||
    you to provide a comment about the changes you have made.
 | 
			
		||||
      <DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="REVCOMMENT"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="savecomment.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 25. Providing a revision control comment</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><H2
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT2"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="AEN484"
 | 
			
		||||
>Reverting to a previous version</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H2
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      If revision control has been enabled, you have the option of
 | 
			
		||||
      reverting to a previous version of the database. Selecting the
 | 
			
		||||
      check box will allow you to select a previous version.
 | 
			
		||||
      <DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="OPENDB"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="opendb.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 26. Opening a database</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      If the check box has be selected, <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
      will display a dialog box that will allow you to choose which version 
 | 
			
		||||
      you would like to view. The dialog box displays the version number, the
 | 
			
		||||
      date the version was saved, who saved the database, and any comment supplied 
 | 
			
		||||
      when the database was saved.
 | 
			
		||||
      <DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="REVCONTROL"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="revcontrol.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 27. Choosing a revision</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Choosing a previous revision does not replace your current
 | 
			
		||||
      database. If you do not save the retrieved database, it will not
 | 
			
		||||
      replace the current version. If for some reason you accidentally
 | 
			
		||||
      save the retrieved database when you did not want to replace the
 | 
			
		||||
      current version, you can always use the revision control
 | 
			
		||||
      mechanism to get back the version you replaced.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>      Revision control is applied only to the database itself, not to
 | 
			
		||||
      any media objects have been associated with the database.
 | 
			
		||||
      </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="bookmarks.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="prefs.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Bookmarking People</TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Customization</TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,255 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>Running Tools</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.64
 | 
			
		||||
"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="GRAMPS User Manual"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Generating Reports"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="genreports.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Authors"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="authors.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS User Manual</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="genreports.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="80%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="authors.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="RUNTOOLS"
 | 
			
		||||
>Running Tools</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    <TT
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS</TT
 | 
			
		||||
> supports standard and user
 | 
			
		||||
    written tools. These tools can operate on the database to perform
 | 
			
		||||
    a specified task.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="TOOLS-FIG"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="toolsel.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 43. Tool Selection Dialog</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Analysis and Exploration</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
><DL
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
>Compare individual events</DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DD
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	  Aids in the analysis of data by allowing the development of
 | 
			
		||||
	  custom filters that can be applied to the database to find
 | 
			
		||||
	  similar events.
 | 
			
		||||
          </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DD
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
>Interactive descendant browser</DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DD
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	  Provides a browsable hierarchy based on the active person.
 | 
			
		||||
	  </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DD
 | 
			
		||||
></DL
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Data Processing</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
><DL
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
>Check and repair database</DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DD
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	  Checks the database for integrity problems, fixing the
 | 
			
		||||
	  problems that it can.
 | 
			
		||||
	  </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DD
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
>Extract information from names</DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DD
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	  Searches the entire database and attempts to extract titles
 | 
			
		||||
	  and nicknames that may be embedded in a person's given name
 | 
			
		||||
	  field.
 | 
			
		||||
	  </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DD
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
>Merge people</DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DD
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	  Searches the entire database, looking for individual entries
 | 
			
		||||
	  that may represent the same person.
 | 
			
		||||
	  </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DD
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
>Rename personal event types</DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DD
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	  Allows all the events of a certain name to be renamed to a
 | 
			
		||||
	  new name.
 | 
			
		||||
	  </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DD
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
>Reorder GRAMPS ID's</DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DD
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	  Reorders the GRAMPS ID's according to GRAMPS' default rules.
 | 
			
		||||
	  </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DD
 | 
			
		||||
></DL
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Utilities</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
><DL
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
>Generate SoundEx codes</DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DD
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	  Generates SoundEx codes for names.
 | 
			
		||||
	  </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DD
 | 
			
		||||
><DT
 | 
			
		||||
>Relationship calculator</DT
 | 
			
		||||
><DD
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>	  Calculates the relationship between two people.
 | 
			
		||||
	  </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DD
 | 
			
		||||
></DL
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="genreports.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="authors.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Generating Reports</TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Authors</TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1,166 +0,0 @@
 | 
			
		||||
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01//EN">
 | 
			
		||||
<HTML
 | 
			
		||||
><HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
>Source View</TITLE
 | 
			
		||||
><META
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
 | 
			
		||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.64
 | 
			
		||||
"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="HOME"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="GRAMPS User Manual"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Pedigree View"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="pedigreeview.html"><LINK
 | 
			
		||||
REL="NEXT"
 | 
			
		||||
TITLE="Place View"
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="placelist.html"></HEAD
 | 
			
		||||
><BODY
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
 | 
			
		||||
TEXT="#000000"
 | 
			
		||||
LINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
VLINK="#840084"
 | 
			
		||||
ALINK="#0000FF"
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
 | 
			
		||||
><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TH
 | 
			
		||||
COLSPAN="3"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
>GRAMPS User Manual</TH
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="pedigreeview.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="80%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="10%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="bottom"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="placelist.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><H1
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="SECT1"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="SOURCELIST"
 | 
			
		||||
>Source View</A
 | 
			
		||||
></H1
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    The Source View window displays the different sources that have
 | 
			
		||||
    been entered into the database. At any time, you can return to
 | 
			
		||||
    this view either by pressing the <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIBUTTON"
 | 
			
		||||
>Sources</B
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
    button at the top of the screen, or by choosing the
 | 
			
		||||
      <B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENU"
 | 
			
		||||
>View</B
 | 
			
		||||
>-><B
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="GUIMENUITEM"
 | 
			
		||||
>Sources</B
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
    entry from the menus.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="FIGURE"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
NAME="SOURCEVIEW-FIG"
 | 
			
		||||
></A
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><IMG
 | 
			
		||||
SRC="sourcelist.png"></P
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
><B
 | 
			
		||||
>Figure 18. Source list</B
 | 
			
		||||
></P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><P
 | 
			
		||||
>    From this screen you are able to Add and Edit sources. Currently,
 | 
			
		||||
    deleting of sources is not available. This will be implemented in
 | 
			
		||||
    a future version.
 | 
			
		||||
    </P
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
><DIV
 | 
			
		||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
 | 
			
		||||
><HR
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="100%"
 | 
			
		||||
BORDER="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLPADDING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
CELLSPACING="0"
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="pedigreeview.html"
 | 
			
		||||
><<< Previous</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="index.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Home</A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
><A
 | 
			
		||||
HREF="placelist.html"
 | 
			
		||||
>Next >>></A
 | 
			
		||||
></TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TR
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="left"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Pedigree View</TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="34%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="center"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
> </TD
 | 
			
		||||
><TD
 | 
			
		||||
WIDTH="33%"
 | 
			
		||||
ALIGN="right"
 | 
			
		||||
VALIGN="top"
 | 
			
		||||
>Place View</TD
 | 
			
		||||
></TR
 | 
			
		||||
></TABLE
 | 
			
		||||
></DIV
 | 
			
		||||
></BODY
 | 
			
		||||
></HTML
 | 
			
		||||
>
 | 
			
		||||
		Reference in New Issue
	
	Block a user